Canon | EOS 5D Mark II | User manual | Canon EOS 5D Mark II User manual

Canon EOS 5D Mark II User manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻜ ًﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ EOS 5D Mark II‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪) CMOS‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ .٢١٫١٠‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ DIGIC 4‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٫٩‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) Full HD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٢١٩‬ﻭ‪ (٢٢٠‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ(‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﺄﺱ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻠﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS5DMKII‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E6/LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪STV-250N‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ (EOS DIGITAL‬ﻭﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E6‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E6E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LC-E6E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪<6‬‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫>‪<9‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫‪،9 ،0‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ : 8 ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﺃﻭ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ a‬ﺃﻭ ‪.F‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪.(1/C‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪) <J‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪) EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ‪ DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪٣ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪١٠ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪١٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٧ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٩ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ‪٣١ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪٣٣ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٣٤ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٣٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٤٠ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪٤٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪٤٢ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٤٢ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٣ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪٤٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪٤٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٤٨ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٥٠ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥١ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٥٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٥٧ ............................................................................................ ISO‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٩ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦١ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪٦٦ .........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٧ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٦٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٧٠ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪٧٢ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٧٤ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٧٦ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٧٨ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٨١ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٨٤ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٨٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٨٥ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٨٦ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٨٨ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٩٠ ......................................................................... Shutter‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪٩٢ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪٩٣ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪٩٤ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٩٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٩٦ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٩٧ ........................................................................ (AEB‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٩٨ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٩٩ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٠١ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٠٢ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٣ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٥ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪١٠٨ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١١٠ .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪١١٣ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١١٩ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪١٢٠ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٢١ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٢٨ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٢٩ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ HI‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٣١ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪١٣٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣٤ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪١٣٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٣٧ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٣٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤١ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٢ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٤٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٤٤ ......................................................................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٤٥ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪١٤٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٤٨ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪١٤٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١٥١ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٥٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٥٦ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٦١ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪١٦٣ .................................................................. (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪١٦٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪١٦٧ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٧٢ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٧٣ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٧٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٧٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٧٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٧٨ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٨٢ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٨٦ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٨٧ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٩٠ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٩٢ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪١٩٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪١٩٧ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٩٨ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٠٠ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٢٠٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٢٠٩ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢١٠ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢١٢ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٢٢٣ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫• ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺹ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺹ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪C.Fn‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﺗُﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺼﺮﺍ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟـ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗُﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﱢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪ ٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪ ٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) (Full Auto) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫>‪) <x‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٢‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ **(‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <n‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٦٥/٩٥‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥/٧٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٨‬‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﺯﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪/ISO‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٣/٥٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Shutter‬ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻜﺔ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥١ ،١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧ ،١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) (N3‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺯﺭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(١١٠ ،٧٩ ،٣٥‬‬
‫>‪ <A/I‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪/(AE‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ / (FE‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٦١ ،١٣٣/١٣١/١٠٣/٩٨‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫>‪<S/u‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪/(AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٦١ ،١٣٣/٨١‬‬
‫>‪ <A/l‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ )ﺹ ‪١٥٩/١٠٩‬‬
‫‪(١٦٨ ،‬‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(١١٠ ،٧٩ ،٣٥‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٤٤ ،٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٢/٤٠‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )] ‪([ - -- --- -- -‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(no CF‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(CLn‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫>‪ <h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫>‪ <g‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫‪ 37‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 38‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 47‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 48‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 67‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 68‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RAW 1‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ W‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻇﻞ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ U‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫‪<g‬‬
‫ﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺾ‬
‫ء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫> < ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ /(AE‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺼﻰ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪<A‬‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪/(FE‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FEB‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ (FEL) (FE‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(no CF‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ ‪y‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ : F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫‪ : a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫‪ : s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪) shutter‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٨‬‬
‫‪ :C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻵﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٧٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٩ ،٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪-‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ‪-‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪٪٥٠ - ٠‬‬
‫‪٪٧٥ - ٥٠‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٧٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ١٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ٥٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ >‬
‫< ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ -‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻳﻨﻔﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣُﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <J‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ >‪) <5‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ <J/1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪ .<f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٣٥‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪ <J>/<2/1‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[ÁAuto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[... Recording‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<J‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)‪(%‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ ٧٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ٍ‬
‫‪٥٠ - ٦٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠ - ٤٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫‪١٠ - ١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫‪١-٩‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٧٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ÃBattery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E6‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻱ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ )]‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ُﺳﻤﻚ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪) (CompactFlash) CF‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ( ّ‬
‫ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪(UDMA) Ultra DMA‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺮﺯ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<J‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [½ Shoot w/o card‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪) 0001‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،CF‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ‪ EW-83H‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 105-EF24‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪،f/4L IS USM‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ EF24-105‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ f/4L IS USM‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺮﻧﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪ ١٠) E‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺳﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .shutter‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .(9).‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :9‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ >‪ <9‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ]‪[¿Erase images‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ ]‪) [Â Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .(9).‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٨٥‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn III -3: AF point selection method‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Multi-controller direct‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥١‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) shutter‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪AEB‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪.<5> <6‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫>‪<5‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ (C/1‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¾‪ [Å/Ä/‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪ Á‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ Ä‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ Å‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫¿ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫½ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪) .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ]‪[¿Erase images‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭ ]‪) [Á Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪(.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Â‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Language‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Â‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <0‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [FORMAT‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Á‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Á‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto power‬‬
‫‪) [off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Ã‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Clear‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Clear all‬‬
‫‪) [camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) Q Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪6‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪zD‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪Clear‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪(C/1‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ً .(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪،d/s/f‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻣﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٨٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪) .‬ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ (.‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻣﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻّ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪ ، ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ >‪ <1‬ﺑﻜﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ >‪ <C‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺇﻟﺦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Creative Auto‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫)‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Creative Auto‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(١‬‬
‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٥٩‬ﻭ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٫٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ) ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٨٦‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٢‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٥٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪.(١‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪:JPEG‬‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻭ‪ 83‬ﻭ‪ 74‬ﻭ‪ 84‬ﻭ‪ 76‬ﻭ‪ .86‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ RAW: 1‬ﻭ‪ D1‬ﻭ‪ .D2‬ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]½[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪) "***M‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ( **** ‪ "**** x‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]***[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(999‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 73‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪73+1‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]–[ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.73‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪74+D2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪D1 RAW‬‬
‫‪D2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪D1 RAW‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪73 JPEG‬‬
‫‪D2‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(21.0M‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ١١٫١‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(11.1M‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(5.2M‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫‪٦٫١‬‬
‫‪٣١٠‬‬
‫‪(٣١٠) ٧٨‬‬
‫‪٣٫٠‬‬
‫‪٦١٠‬‬
‫‪(٦١٠) ٦١٠‬‬
‫‪٣٫٦‬‬
‫‪٥١٠‬‬
‫‪(٥١٠) ٣٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٩‬‬
‫‪٩٩٠‬‬
‫‪(٩٩٠) ٩٩٠‬‬
‫‪٢٫١‬‬
‫‪٩١٠‬‬
‫‪(٩١٠) ٩١٠‬‬
‫‪١٫٠‬‬
‫‪١٦٨٠‬‬
‫‪(١٦٨٠) ١٦٨٠‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٢٥٫٨‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪(١٤) ١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪١٤٫٨‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪(١٥) ١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪١٠٫٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪(٢٠) ٢٠‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(21.0M‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(9.9M‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)‪(5.2M‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٦٫١+٢٥٫٨‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪(٨) ٨‬‬
‫‪ ١١٫١‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٦٫١+١٤٫٨‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪(٨) ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪A4‬‬
‫‪ A2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫‪٦٫١+١٠٫٨‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫‪(٨) ٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ ISO 100) Canon‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ (UDMA) Ultra DMA‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ JPG‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.(CR2‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ D1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،D2‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪.D‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ (RAW) 1 :‬ﻭ‪) D1‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (RAW1‬ﻭ‪D2‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (RAW2‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪) 7‬ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ( ﻭ‪) 8‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ( ﻭ‪)3‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭ‪) 4‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) 6‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.D2‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "‪ "RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪1 .‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ D1‬ﻭ‪.D2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.TIFF‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪ [ÄC.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[ÄC.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢-٢‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪Standard) (١٧٦‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪) Low/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪) Strong/‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪) Disable/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫‪ (RAW+73/83‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﻮ "‪ "99‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫"‪."99‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2: Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ ‪ ،(٢:‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ "‪ "٩٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٩٨‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٥‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪N ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(1/C‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ISO 100-6400‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٣/١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪ ،"A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪ :i‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪L, 100 - 200‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪400 - 800‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬
‫‪1600 - 6400, H1, H2‬‬
‫ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II 3-: Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ‬
‫‪) ISO 200 - 6400‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻛﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn I -3: ISO expansion‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "L‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (ISO 50‬ﻭ”‪) “H1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (ISO 12800‬ﻭ"‪) "H2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟـ‬
‫‪) (ISO 25600‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) "ISO "A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ ،"A‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪1/C/d/s/f‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ISO 100 - 3200‬‬
‫‪a/F‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪*ISO 400‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¾Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) StandardP‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) PortraitQ‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( )‪ :C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٦١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) LandscapeR‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫‪) NeutralS‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) FaithfulU‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 5200‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) MonochromeV‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )‪ :C‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪) User Def. 1-3 W‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣-١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟـ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺇﻟﺦ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٦٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Picture Style‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :0‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :+7‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ :-4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :+4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ g‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) None :N‬ﺑﻼ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪) Yellow :Ye‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪) Orange :Or‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ( ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪) Red :R‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪) Green :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﻼ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Landscape‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [User Def. 1‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ .(٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪*User‬‬
‫‪) [Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﻜﻦ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٦٢-٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[* User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(1/C‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻔﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫‪7000 - 3000‬‬
‫‪5200‬‬
‫‪7000‬‬
‫‪6000‬‬
‫‪3200‬‬
‫‪4000‬‬
‫‪6000‬‬
‫‪10000 - 2000‬‬
‫‪10000 - 2500‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¾ White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¾[‪[Custom WB] ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) . <n‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪.<O‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٦٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪ <O‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ ،٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪ P‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ >¾<‪[White balance] ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[P‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¾[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB SHIFT/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪A2, G1 :‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"SHIFT‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <u‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :Mired‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪ u‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪A2 ،G1 :‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<5‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫" )ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫"‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ -١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ -٢ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ -١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ -٢ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ -٣ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫”‪ "BKT‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]½[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪[Peripheral‬‬
‫]‪) illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction‬‬
‫‪) [data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Correction data not available‬‬
‫)ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[Select folder] ،[Á‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Create folder‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Create folder‬‬
‫)ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ "‪ "100EOS5D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.(٩٩٩٩ - ٠٠٠١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٧٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ ﺟﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ."DCIM‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "100ABC_D‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩ - ١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫"‪ "100ABC_D‬ﻭ "‪ "100W_XYZ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Á‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ .٩٩٩٩‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪XXX-0052‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٢-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪XXX-0001‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١-‬‬
‫‪XXX-0051‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑـ‬
‫"_‪ ."MVI‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ"‪".MOV‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(1/C‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¾[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) 2.0‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.(Exif 2.21) 2.0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(1/C‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻡ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(1/C‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "AI Focus AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI‬‬
‫‪ (Focus‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > ‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ : X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ : 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫‪ : Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ"‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [½ Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<p‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ( ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI SERVO‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪،Servo‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣّﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫>‪.<9‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<5‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪f/5.6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪f/2.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ ‪ EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM‬ﻭ‪.EF50mm f/2.5‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ f/2.8‬ﻭ‪ ،f/5.6‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪.f/5.6‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪(<o‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪i‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎ ًَﻣﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > ‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫‪ : u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣٫٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ : k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "buSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "FuLL CF‬ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪،LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪) <Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > ‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ : k‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٠٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٥٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪.(0‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪d/s/f/‬‬
‫‪ a/F‬ﻓﻲ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ" ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ‪) Program AE‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "٣٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪.‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "٨٠٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ >‪)<1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ، ،<1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪:s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ .Shutter‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ shutter‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻣﻦ "‪ "٨٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ "‪ "٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "١٢٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٥/١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "٥"٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ "‪ "١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f/‬ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ ""٣٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f/‬ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ ""٨٠٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٦‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ )ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f/‬ﺃﻗﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،f/‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﺘﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ f/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫* ﺗﺸﻴﺮ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ ،<J‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <s‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪،(C/1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪٨‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪٣٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٣/١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <d> ،<s‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<J‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<5‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (0‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II 4-: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤-٤‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٧٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¾Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪N(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫"‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ("‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]½[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo.‬‬
‫‪) [comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪AEB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <h‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<u‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫>‪ <i‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪A‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<A‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫‪*q‬‬
‫‪wre‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ .shutter‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<F‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪،shutter‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II 1-:Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:1-2‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1:Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [2:On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .( ١٠٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ U‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<U‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ )‪ .(9‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪ :F‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻟﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ‪ EOS‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ N3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn III -6: Mirror lockup‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٦-٣‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٨٠‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .shutter‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪) shutter‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable:1‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،k‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ RS-80N3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ،RC-1‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﺃﻭ ‪) RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ RC-1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻼ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪RC-5‬‬
‫‪RC-5‬‬
‫‪RC-1‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<o‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<k‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻴﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlit‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Macro Lites‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪) ٣/١‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon Speedlit‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻒ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [ÂLive View/Movie func. set.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Silent shoot.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٢٠‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺬﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 580EX II‬ﻭ‪ (430EX II‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External Speedlite control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Ã‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪External‬‬
‫‪) [Speedlite control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Flash function‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪Flash‬‬
‫‪) [exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻭ]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻟـ ]‪) [Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ (Shutter‬ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Flash C.Fn‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ]‪C.Fn-0:‬‬
‫‪) [Distance indicator display‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Flash metering mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫])‪) [TTL (autoflash‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪) ١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ،١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.d/s/f/a/F :‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Â‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪[Live View/‬‬
‫]‪) Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LV func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[LV func. setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪ "LV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ]‪Live View function‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Stills only‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪[Stills+movie‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٢١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Stills display‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪N‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪h‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪g‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪e‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Stills display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Movie display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٢٦-١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) (C/1‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [¾ Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Â Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Ã Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪[Ã Firmware‬‬
‫]‪) Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٢٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.٪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ÁAuto power‬‬
‫‪) [off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٤٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÁAuto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [ÂLive View/Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪) [ Grid 1‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [ Grid 2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ÂLive View/Movie‬‬
‫‪) [.func. set‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ‪shutter‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٤٠-١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٢‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫‪FEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫· ‪ :h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫· ‪ :g‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫· ‪ :e‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫·‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬
‫·‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫·‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫* ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ>‪<E‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪) <E‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >‪ ،<E‬ﻓﺴﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <g‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Exposure simulation‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٠٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ ،<g‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ﻭ]‪Live‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١١٥‬ﻭ]‪) [Liveu mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪[ÂLive View/Movie‬‬
‫]‪) func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪،‬‬
‫]‪) [AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٧٩‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RS-80N3‬ﻭﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ> < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫<‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‬
‫< ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪..‬‬
‫>‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ >‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ > < ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<f‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫>‪ .<p‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ > < ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RS-80N3‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) TC-80N3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<u‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [.Silent shoot‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[ÂLive View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ TS-E‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪Mode‬‬
‫‪) [2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Mode 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (٢‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Mode 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(١‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٤٠-١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Â Live View/Movie func. set.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.١٠٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪(C/1‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪d/s/f/a/F‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LV func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Stills+movie‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫• ]‪[640x480‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ movie‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫●‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪Shooting‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Screen‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١١٩-١١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "●" ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ]‪ [١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ]‪ ،[٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.(Canon‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪٧٣/‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.(LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،d/s/f/a/F‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [LV func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Stills+movie‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Stills display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Exposure simulation‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.٣٢٠٠ - ١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٦٤٠٠‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (H1: 12800‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Stills display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Exposure simulation‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Movie display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٤٠‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ]‪ ،[١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ]‪ [١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ (١٤٠-١٣٩‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MOV‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻝ‪ Ü sRGB‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Movie display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <J‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) <5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪.(C/1‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ (AE‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<S‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) [Liveu (Face detection) mode‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ((‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<Q‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<k‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪) <u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-1/RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،RC-1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <2‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II 4-: Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٤-٤‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٧٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪) [Disable :3‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/Shutter‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ >‪<P‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫*ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [À Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ÀAF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [ÀHistogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Brightne‬ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[RGB‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<I‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Î‬‬
‫‪Î‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<6‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]‪) [À Image jump w/6‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ← ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ ← ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[À Image jump w/6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،(6‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫]‪) image 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪images 10/‬‬
‫‪ (10‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ‪ images (100 100/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Screen/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪) Date/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪) Movies/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) Stills‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Screen‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Folder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻜﺒﱠﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<u‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<u‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ (<6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪°٠ ← °٢٧٠ ← °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Á Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ (١٤٦‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Á Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [À‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Slide‬‬
‫‪) [show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪[All images/Movies/Stills‬‬
‫)ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) jAll images] :‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Folder/Date‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪[nFolder‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [iDate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ < z‬ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪) jAll images‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) nFolder‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) iDate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) zStills‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Play time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set up‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ]‪Play‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ ]‪[Repeat‬‬
‫)ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Loading image...‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ (...‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤٠-١٣٩‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪)k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <Çs‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<u‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Í‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪)kPlaying Movies.‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪) È Exit‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Í Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Î Slow motion‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<5‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Ë First frame‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ( ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪É Previous frame‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ì Next frame‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Ê Last frame‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫"‪) mm' SS‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪) Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٤٠-١٣٩‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser Ex/‬‬
‫‪) ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺑ ﱢﺪﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Â Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪<dHDMI MINI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺑ ﱢﺪﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ >‪ <q‬ﻭ>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤٣‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٣‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٤١‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Select and‬‬
‫‪) [erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [¿Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images in folder‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Â‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪LCD‬‬
‫‪) [brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،(LCD‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Manual‬‬
‫)ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<5‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Review time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]½[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Review‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Á‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻟﻨﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1/J‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺾ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻟﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Á‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Clean nowf‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1/J‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻀﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¾[ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust‬‬
‫‪) [Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪٠٫٧/‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٫٠‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﺖ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ"‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ .RAW‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ٌ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Â‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clean‬‬
‫‪) [manually‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫"‪ "CLn‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻏﻠﻖ ‪ .shutter‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫>‪ ،<D‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪wPictBridge‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪Bubble Jet‬‬
‫‪.Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤّﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Bordered‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ( ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Borderless‬ﺑﻼ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bordered c‬‬
‫)ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪20-upc‬‬
‫)‪ 20‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪35-upp‬‬
‫)‪ 35‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪) Letter‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٣‬‬
‫• ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) EVivid‬ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ENR‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫‪0B/W‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪0Cool tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬
‫‪0Warm tone‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪) zNatural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬
‫‪zNatural‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪)M‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪EDefault‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ ،<R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ (.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٦١‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٥٨‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ .<9‬ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<5‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪Print type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪) Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪File number‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Ë‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[All image‬‬
‫)ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻔﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻔﻠﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٩٩‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ "‪Byn‬‬
‫)ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ(" ﺃﻭ "‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪".‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٥٤‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٥٨‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Resume‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪ Solution Disk‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪" ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫>‪ ،<D‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [EOS Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫‪d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ ،[EOS Utility‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [My Pictures‬ﺻﻮﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All images‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <l‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎءً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫‪d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [All images‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪) New images‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Transfer order images‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٠‬‬
‫‪) Select & transfer‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪) Wallpaper‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ً <0‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫‪d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]¿[‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Transfer order images‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٦٩‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺗﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Byn‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺠﻠ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ‪) All image‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ؛‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪<x‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <y‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ d :‬ﻭ‪s‬ﻭ‪ f‬ﻭ‪ a‬ﻭ‪.F‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Ä‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[Ä‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ ،٥-١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[ÄC.Fn IV -5: Focusing Screen‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٥-٥‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪/shutter‬ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AF-ON/‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪(٦‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١-١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) 1/3-stop :٠‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪(١/٣‬‬
‫‪) 1/2-stop :١‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪(١/٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻌ ً‬
‫ﱠﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.١/٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢-١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ 1/3-stop :٠‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪١/٣-‬‬
‫‪ 1-stop :١‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪١-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣-١‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "L‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO 50‬ﻭ"‪) "H1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO 12800‬ﻭ"‪"H2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO 25600‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤-١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) On :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪AEB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻼﻧﻄﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) Off :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭ‪) WB-BKT‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪AEB‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥ -١‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻭﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪+ ,- ,٠ :٠‬‬
‫‪+ ,٠ ,- :١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪M/G‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪B/A‬‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : ٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ : -‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ : +‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦-١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )‪(Tv/Av‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ )‪ shutter (s‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ .(f‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٧-١‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫‪) Auto :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) 1/200-1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ٦٠/١-٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻌ ً‬
‫ﱠﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻜﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١/٢٠٠ sec. (fixed) (1/200) :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١-٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻌ ً‬
‫ﱠﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) On :٢‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻌﱠﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ "‪ "١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢-٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﱠﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻼءﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard :٠‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Low :١‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫‪) Strong :٢‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫‪) Disable :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣ -٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫[‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦٤٠٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪) <A‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤-٢‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard :٠‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Low :١‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫‪) Strong :٢‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫‪) Disable :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪Ð‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١-٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Focus search on :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Focus search off :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢-٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ IS‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF stop :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) AF start :١‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AE lock :٢‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AF point :٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪) M :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪) Auto/Auto Ì‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪Ì‬‬
‫‪) center‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ً‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT z AI SERVO :٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI Servo AF‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (Al Servo‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(Al Servo‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (Al Servo‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) IS start :٥‬ﺑﺪء ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،5‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣-٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) Normal :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <9‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <5/6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Multi-controller direct :١‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Quick Control Dial direct :٢‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<S‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <S‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<6‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤-٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪) On :٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Off :١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻜﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻋﺠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥-٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪) Enable :٠‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) Disable :١‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪EOS‬‬
‫]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disabled‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٠-٥ - ٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦-٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٧-٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (AI Servo‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٨٠‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻌﱠﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٨-٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Liveu‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٢٠±‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Forward :-‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ( ‪) Backward :+ /‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ )‪ ،(73‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Adjust all by same amount :١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust by lens :٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٧٢‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫]‪) [Disable :0‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ١-٤‬ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start :٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start/AF stop :١‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Metering start/Metering + AF start :٢‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI‬‬
‫‪) Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo AF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AE lock/Metering + AF start :٣‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Metering + AF start/Disable :٤‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢-٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON/AE lock‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A/y‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣-٤‬‬
‫‪) Assign SET button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪" SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ"(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Normal (disabled) :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ "ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ"(‬
‫‪) Image quality :١‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style :٢‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪<5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Menu display :٣‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪) Image replay :٤‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪) Quick Control screen :٥‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ >‪ <9‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Record movie (Live View) :٦‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ"(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ÂLive View/Movie func. set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٢١‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤-٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Tv/Av/Av‬‬
‫‪) Normal :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪) Reverse direction :١‬ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ >‪ <6‬ﻭ>‪ .<5‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥-٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Eg-A :٠‬‬
‫‪Eg-D :١‬‬
‫‪Eg-S :٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :Eg-A‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُ ﱢ‬
‫ﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Eg-D‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Eg-A‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Eg-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Eg-A‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻌﱠﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Eg-S‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ f/2.8‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،f/2.8‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Eg-A‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ Eg-A‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠-٥-٥‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٥- ٥‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٧‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦-٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٢٩‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Original Data Security Kit OSK-‬‬
‫‪) E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Original Data‬‬
‫‪.Security Kit OSK-E3‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Å‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪My‬‬
‫‪) Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫‪) Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) Delete / Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪] .‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻳﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ( ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [Å‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ >‪ <w‬ﻭ>‪ <x‬ﻭ>‪ ،<y‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Camera user setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Ã‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Camera‬‬
‫‪) [user setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ‪ *C‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪ w‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪) Shooting functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ +‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]½[ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫]¾[ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]‪ [À‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪6‬‬
‫]‪ [Á‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ،‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫]‪ [Â‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫]‪ [Ã‬ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO.‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫]‪ [Ä‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <y‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪) [ÃClear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻭ ])‪[ÄClear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <x‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<y‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ >‪<w‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <x‬ﻭ>‪) <y‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ "‪Camera‬‬
‫‪) "settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭ"‪) "Shooting functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "Shooting functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "Camera set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻭ"‪) "Shoot. func.‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Ã‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[INFO. button‬‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [.Camera set‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Shoot. func.‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ‪ w‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ x‬ﻭ‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٦‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٩ ،٦٨‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ*‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٥ ،٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.WFT-E4/E4A‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <9‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ > ‪ <o‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﻭ >‪،<S‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪<5‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<9‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪) "Shooting settings display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[Ã‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Battery‬‬
‫‪) [info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٨‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪.٪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E6‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ،BG-E6‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ،BG-E6‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪Cannot‬‬
‫‪) [communicate with battery‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Register‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<M‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪) Battery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ BG-E6‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪.AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٩٥‬‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺇﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺑﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫‪5900‬‬
‫‪a81a‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ × ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ × ‪ ٠٫٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٢‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻼ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete battery info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٩٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Delete battery info.‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫>‪ <X‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <5‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E6‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻋﻮﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ CR1616‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻴﺒﺲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪– +‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪.CR1616‬‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬:
‫ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬:k ‫ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬:o
F
a
f s
d
C
1
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
JPEG
RAW (‫ )ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬Quality
RAW+JPEG
(‫ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto
(‫ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬Manual
k
k
k
o
ISO speed
(ISO ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
(‫ )ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬Standard
(‫ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬Portrait
(‫ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬Landscape
(‫ )ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬Neutral
Picture Style
(‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
(‫ )ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬Faithful
k
(‫ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬Monochrome
(‫ )ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬User Defined
o
o
(‫ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto WB
‫ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬Preset WB
ً ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
(‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬Custom WB
White
(‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬Color temperature setting ‫ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬balance
(‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
(‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬WB correction
(‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ )ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬WB bracketing
(‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
o
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Color space
(‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
(‫ )ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto Lighting Optimizer
‫ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬Peripheral illumination correction
(‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬Long exposure noise reduction
(‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬High ISO speed noise reduction
(‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
(‫ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬Highlight tone priority
١٩٨
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬:
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬:k ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬:o
F a f s d
k k k
C 1
k k
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
(‫ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬One-Shot
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
o
o
k k k
k k
o
o
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
(‫ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬Spot
k k
Center-weighted average
(‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
k k k
k
k
k k
k k
k k
AI Servo
AI Focus
(‫ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬Auto
(‫ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬Manual
o
o
AF
AF point (‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
selection
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
(‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
(‫ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬Evaluative
(‫ )ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬Partial
k
(‫ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬Program shift
k
‫ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬Exposure compensation
(‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
(‫ )ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬AEB
k
k k
(‫ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬AE lock
k k k
k k
(‫ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬Depth-of-field preview
k k k
k k
k
k k k
k k
k
k k k
k k
k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
k k k
k k
١٩٩
o
Metering
mode
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
(‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
Exposure
(‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬Single shooting
(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬Continuous shooting
k
sec. self-timer/Remote control 10
(‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬/‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
ٍ 10 ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
Drive
(‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
sec. self-timer/Remote control 2
(‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬/‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬
(FE ‫ )ﻗﻔﻞ‬FE lock
External
Flash exposure compensation
Speedlite
(‫ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬Speedlite ‫)ﻓﻼﺵ‬
(‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬Flash control
(‫ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬Stills only
k
k
(‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬+‫ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬Stills+movie
Live View
‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬shooting
(‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫½ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪) Shoot w/o card‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) Review time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪86 / 76 / 84 / 74 / 83 / 73‬‬
‫‪D1 / D2 / 1‬‬
‫‪) On / Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On / Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٤/‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٨/‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫‪) Enable / Disable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫¾ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Exposure compensation/AEB‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،١/٣‬ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢±‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪Q/W/E/R/Y/U/I/‬‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪(١٠٠٠٠ - ٢٥٠٠) O / P‬‬
‫‪) Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪) WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪QPortrait /‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ( ‪٦٤-٥٩ UFaithful /‬‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫)ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) ٣ ,٢ ,١ .WUser Def‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫¿ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪) Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫‪) External media backup‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪) WFT-E4/E4A‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪.(C/1‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ À‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪) Disable / Enable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪) AF point display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪) Disable / Enable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪) Highlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪6/‬‬
‫‪) Brightness / RGB‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪) image 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) images 10 /‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪100 /‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠) images‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) Screen /‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ‪) Date /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪) Folder /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ‪) Movies /‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪) Stills /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ Á‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪).1min‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪) .min 2/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ ٤).min 4 /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪.min 8 /‬‬
‫)‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ١٥).min 15 /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ‪ ٣٠).min 30 /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) zD / On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) D / Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Manual reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪) Select folder‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‬
‫‪) WFT settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(WFT‬‬
‫‪Recording function+ media select‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ +‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪) WFT-E4/E4A‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪) WFT-E4/E4A‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ(‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ Â‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪Enable / Disable :‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Clean now‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪) Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬
‫‪LV func. setting* / Silent shooting / Metering‬‬
‫‪) timer‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ* ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻦ ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ Live View/Movie function settings‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪) AF mode /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪) Movie recording size /‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪) Sound recording /‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫* ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ >‪ ،<C/1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Movie recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Ã‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) .Battery info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) INFO. button‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪External Speedlite‬‬
‫‪) control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫‪Camera user setting‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪) Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪) .Firmware Ver‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪) Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‪) Remaining capacity ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Shutter count‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪Shutter)، Recharge‬‬
‫‪) performance‬ﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪Battery registration ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪) Battery history ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) Normal display‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ( ‪Camera settings /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ‪) Shooting function /‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪) Flash function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) Flash C.Fn settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s /‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪(Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ ‪y‬‬
‫‪) Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪) Delete copyright information /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ Ä‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪Clear all Custom‬‬
‫)‪) Functions (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪) Å My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E6‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،(Canon‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺳﺘﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ÃBattery info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٩٢‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Quick Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٣٨‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٧‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ÁAuto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٢ ،٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤ ،٣٥‬‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٣٥ ،٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II -2:High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ :٢-٢‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪Standard/] :‬‬
‫‪) [Low/Disable‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺐ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪.ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [ÄC.Fn II 3-: Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:٣-٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ .ISO 200 - 6400‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[ÄC.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٧-١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٥‬‬
‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Silent shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [Flash metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻋﻠﻰ ])‪ TTL) [TTL (autoflash‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٠‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ً‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Live View‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Screen settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Stills display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Exposure simulation‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ ،(C/1‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)d/s/f/a/F‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [ÀHighlight alert‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [ÀAF point disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[ Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤١‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )"_‪.("_MG‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠٠٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٠ ،١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <2‬ﻭ>‪ ،<1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) Err 02‬ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) (٢‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪٠١‬‬
‫‪٠٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the‬‬
‫‪) lens contacts.‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺣﻬﻤﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٦ ،١٣‬‬
‫‪) There is a problem with the card. Replace the card.‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٣ ،٢٩‬‬
‫‪٠٤‬‬
‫‪٠٦‬‬
‫‪Cannot save images because the card is full. Replace the card.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪،٢٩‬‬
‫‪(٤٣ ،١٤٢‬‬
‫‪Self Cleaning Sensor Unit malfunction. Consult with Canon‬‬
‫‪) Service Center.‬ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪(.Canon‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫‪Shooting is not possible. Turn the power switch to <2> and‬‬
‫‪) <1> again or re-install the battery. ،٢٠ ،١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،٤٠ ،٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ >‪ <2‬ﻭ>‪ً <1‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪،٦٠ ،٥٠‬‬
‫‪ Í ٨٠ ،٧٠‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦ ،٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RC-1‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪RC-5‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪LC-5‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪RS-80N3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪TC-80N3‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HTC-100 HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪STV-250N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪WFT-E4/WFT-E4A‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪USB GPS‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪IFC-200U‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-500U‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪PCMCIA‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪EP-EX15‬‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MT-24EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪220EX 430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬
‫‪ST-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ‪Eb‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ E‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Eg-A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪Eb‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-EOS5DMKII‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪CR1616‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ LC-E6E‬ﺃﻭ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪Eg-D Eg-S‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪BG-E6‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪AC-E6‬‬
‫‪DR-E6‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪BGM-E6‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪CB-570‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪CBC-E6‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪) AF/AE‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪UDMA‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﱠﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﱠﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٫١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٣:٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) Camera File System 2.0‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪(٢٫٠‬‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪) RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٧٤٤ × ٥٦١٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ١١٫١٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٧٢٠ × ٤٠٨٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪ ٥٫٢٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٨٥٦ × ٢٧٨٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٠٠ : RAW‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٧٤٤ × ٥٦١٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٠٠ : sRAW1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٥٧٤ × ٣٨٦١‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢٠ : sRAW2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٨٥٦ × ٢٧٨٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣ - ١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪) ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ ١٠٠٠٠-٢٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ‪ ٪٩٨‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١-) ×٠٫٧١‬ﻡ‪ ١-‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪(١-‬‬
‫‪١‬‬‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔﻟﻀﺒﻂﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ١٫٠+ - ٣٫٠- :‬ﻡ )‪(dpt‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ )ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Eg-A‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪) EV -0.5 - 18‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫)ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ TTL‬ﺫﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ )‪ ٪٨‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪ ٪٣٫٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ISO 100 - 3200‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪) ISO 100 - 6400 :B ،M ،Av ،Tv ،P‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪(١/٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 50‬‬
‫)‪ (L‬ﺃﻭﺇﻟﻰ )‪ ISO 12800 (H1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 25600‬‬
‫)‪(H2‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪١/٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪:Shutter‬‬
‫‪ ،shutter‬ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪.shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٩‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٧٨ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ٣١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ ١٣ :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ١٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٨ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ٨‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪Canon‬‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ١٠٠ ISO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪،Ultra DMA (UDMA‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪:FE‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪EX-series Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢±‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺃﻭ ‪٢/١‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٥/١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫‪) MOV‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ PCM :‬ﺧﻄﻲ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٤٨٠×٦٤٠ ،١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠ :‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪TFT‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ٩٢٠٠٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪(VGA‬‬
‫‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫×‪ 10× - 1.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٫١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ‪ C1‬ﻭ‪ C2‬ﻭ‪ C3‬ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫• ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪N3‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RC-5/RC-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WFT-E4/E4A‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E6‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ACK-E6‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E6‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪AA/LR6‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﺃﺩﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ CIPA‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٨٥٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪ ٧٥٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٧٥ × ١١٣٫٥ × ١٥٢ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٠ × ٤٫٥ × ٦٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨١٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٨٫٦ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ )ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٧٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٥٦٫٨ × ٢١ × ٣٨٫٤ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٢ × ٠٫٨ × ١٫٥ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ١٫٢/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪٤١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٩٣ × ٣٣ × ٦٩ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٧ × ١٫٣ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ )ﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ‪ ٤٫٦ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E6E‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻥ ‪ ٦٫٦ /‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ١٫٢/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪٤١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٩٣ × ٣٣ × ٦٩ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٧ × ١٫٣ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٥‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ‪ ٤٫٤ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‬
‫• ‪105mm f/4L IS USM-EF24‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪<٢٠°٢٣ - °٨٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪<٢٠°١٩ - °٧٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪°١٣ - °٥٣ :‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٣‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪f/22‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٤٥‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ١٫٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬
‫×‪) 0.23‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٠٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٦ × ١٥٨ - ٣٤٥ × ٥٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٢ × ٦٫٢ - ١٣٫٦ × ٢١٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٤٥‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫‪E-77U‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٧ × ٨٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٢ × ٣٫٣ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٦٧٠‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ‪ ٢٣٫٦ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪EW-83H‬‬
‫‪) LP1219‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) 1080‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ CompactFlash‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ‪. SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Apple Inc‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،Camera File System 2.0‬ﻭ‪Exif 2.21‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺴﻤﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(" Exif Print‬ﻳﻌﺪ ‪Exif Print‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (١‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG-4‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪".MPEG-4‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ً‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ .(+ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ °٠‬ﻭ‪°٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ً‬
‫)ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪°٣٢‬ﻭ‪°١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١٩‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻘﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ٍ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫• ﻻ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻨﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DS126201‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ‪(١) :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦) ٣٢٨ -٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ACK-E6‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E6‬ﻭ‪.LC-E6E‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪(٢) ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (٣) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ—ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E6‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺏ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺮﻛﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖ – ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢١ .....................................١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪٤ ........................................‬‬
‫‪١٢١ ........................................ ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪٧٦ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) AE lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٩٨ .................‬‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪١٧٥ ،١٧٤ ،٩٧ ....‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) AI FOCUS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٨٠ ..............................(AI Focus‬‬
‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٩ ،٥٠ ........................ (AI Servo‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪٩٢ .......‬‬
‫‪) B‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪٩٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪) C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥١ ................................‬‬
‫‪١٠٥ ...............................................FEB‬‬
‫‪١٤٠ .............................................HDMI‬‬
‫‪٥٤ .............................................. JPEG‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪٩٤ ....................‬‬
‫‪ M‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪) MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ‪٨٤ ...........................‬‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ‪١٨٦ ............................‬‬
‫‪) NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ( )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ‪١٥٨ .................‬‬
‫‪٢٠١ ............................................ NTSC‬‬
‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٨٨ .......................‬‬
‫‪٢٠١ ............................................... PAL‬‬
‫‪١٥٣ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫‪٥٦ ،٥٤ ..........................................RAW‬‬
‫‪٥٤ .................................... RAW+JPEG‬‬
‫‪) sRAW‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪٥٦ ،٥٤ ........... (RAW‬‬
‫‪٧٦ .............................................. sRGB‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٩٠ .........(Shutter‬‬
‫‪٥٥ ،٢٩ ................... (Ultra DMA (UDMA‬‬
‫‪ WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪w‬ﻭ ‪ x‬ﻭ‪١٨٧ ،٢٠ ............................ y‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪٦٢ ،٦٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٧٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪٢٠٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٩ .......................(LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٩٠ ................ Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٩٢ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٩٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٧٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪٧٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٦ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٨٧ ،٢٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪٧٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪٧٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٥ ،٣٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٧٧ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٤ ،٢٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٨ .......................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٨٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٨٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٣ ،٢٩ ،١٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٢٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪٤٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪٣٠ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٨٥ .....‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١٤٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦٢ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٦٢ .........................‬‬
‫‪٢٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٤٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪١٩٧ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪١٦٠ ،٦١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٤٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪١٧٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪٨١ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪٨١ ........‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٢١٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٠٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٠٣ .................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪١٠٥ .......‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٧٥ ،١٠٤ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٦١ ،١٤٦ ،١٣٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٤٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٧٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪١٦٠ ،٦١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪٧٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٠٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪١١١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪١١٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪١١٦ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١١٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١١٩ ،١١٣ .....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪١٢١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١١١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١١٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٠٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪١٢٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪١٠٢ ،١٠٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪١٢٠ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ‪٨٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪١٩١ ،٨٥ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٩١ ،١٧٤ ،١٠٣ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٧٤ ،٩٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪١٧٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪١٧٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪١٧٦ ...........‬‬
‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪١٧٦ ........‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪٥١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٤٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٢٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪١٦٣ .................................... DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٤٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪١٤٧ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٦١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٣ .......................... (CF‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٦٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪١٩١ ،٦٥ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ‪٦٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٦٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٦٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪٦٧ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪١٩٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٩٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٥٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪١٢١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٢٩ ،١٢٣ ،٥٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪٥٦ ،٥٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻧﻌﻢ‪/‬ﻻ(‪١٥٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻭﺓ‪١٠٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪٢٣ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪٦٠ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٤١ .....................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪٩٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪١٦٠ ،٦١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪٦١ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٧ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٧٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪٧٤ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٢٠٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ‪١٥٨ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫)ﺑﺪء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ‪١٨٢ ،٣٥ ....................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪٤٠ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪٣٥ ........................................Shutter‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٧٨ .....................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٤٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٩١ ،١٧٤ ،٥٧ ..........................ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٧٤ .............................ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ‪١٤٠ ،١٣٩ ،٣ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣ ..........................................LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪١٤٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٢٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٠٠ ،٤٠ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٩١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٣٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٨٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪١٣٠ ....... (RGB/‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪٢٠٠ ،٧٩ ،٤٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٥٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪٥٦ ،٥٤ .................RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٢ ،٦٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٦٢ ،٦٠ ......................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٥٩ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٢٩ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٤٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ‪١٤٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٢٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ‪١٣٠ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٣١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪١٣٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪١٣٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٢٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪١٤١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٢٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪١٦٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪١٣٩ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٧٩ ..........AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٧٩ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ‪٨٣ .....................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١١٩ ،٨٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٩١ ،٧٨ ...............‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٢٩ ..............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٩١ ،١٧٩ ،٨١ ....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪١٧٩ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ‪٢٠٠ ،٧٩ ،٤٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪٨٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١١٩ ،١١٣ .......‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١١٩ ،٨٤ .......................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١١٨ ،٨٤ ،٤٩ ................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪٥٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪٩٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٩٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٨١ ........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪١٩٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪٩٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪٣٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪٣٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٤٨ .............................‬‬
‫‪٢٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٤٤ ،٢٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٩٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪١٩٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١١١ ،٥٥ ،٢٨ ....................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪٢٧ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٥٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪١٥٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ‪١٥٦ ................................‬‬
‫‪١٥٣ ................................. PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪١٦٣ ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪١٥٩ .............................. <l‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٦٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪١٦١ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٦١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٥٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪١٦٧ ،١٥٤ ....................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) USB‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪١٦٧ ،١٥٤ ............‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٠٤ ،١٦ .....................‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٥٥ .......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪١٢١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪١٤٠ ،١٢١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣١ ،٢١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪٣٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪٧٠ .......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٩١ .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٣٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١١١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١٣٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٣١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪١٣٣ ،١١٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪١٢٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٣٩ ................................‬‬
‫‪٢٢٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٣١ ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪١٧٩ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٢٩ .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ‪٥٩ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ‪٢٠٣ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٠٠ ،٢٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪١٨٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ ‪١٨٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ‪٨٦ ..............‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪١٧ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪١٢٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٠٦ .......................... E-TTL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٠٤ ،١٠٣ .......‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٣ ........................................ FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٣٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪١٢١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪١٣٩ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٠٠ ................................‬‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ‪١٨٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪٤٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٣ ............................................ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٥٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٨٠ ،١٠١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٤٠ ،١٣٩ ،٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٠٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠١ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٤٥ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪٥٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٦٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ‪٧٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١١١ ،٥٥ ،٢٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪١٨ .......................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٩٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪٦٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٥٥ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ‪٣٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪١٩٦ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٠٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٧٧ ،٤٧ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪١٨٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢١٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪١٠٥ ..................................Shutter‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪١٠٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٧٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪٣٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪١٣٨ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٤٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٤٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٣٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٩٩ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪١٧٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪١٧٤ ،٩٧ ،٦٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪٩٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪٩٥ .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪٤٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٣٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪١٠٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪٣٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٣٧ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٨٤ ،٣١ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪١٩٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٩٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٥٥ .....................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٨٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ‪١٢٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ‪١٧٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪٢٠١ ،١٣٩ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٨٠ ................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٦٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٦٧ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٤ - ٥٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪٥٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪١٠٤ .............Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪١٠٣ ........EX‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٨١ ،٣٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٧٦ .......................................... ICC‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٩١ ،٨٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪٩٢ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪٩٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪٤٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٩٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٨٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٩٠ ............Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١١٣ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٩١ ،٩٥ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٧٢ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٧٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٢٠١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٤٥ ...............................‬‬
‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
U.S.A.
CANON U.S.A. INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.
1-800-OK-CANON
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada
1-800-OK-CANON
EUROPE,
AFRICA &
MIDDLE EAST
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa,6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON Portugal S.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CENTRAL &
SOUTH AMERICA
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.
ASIA
CANON (China) Co., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea
OCEANIA
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
JAPAN
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of September 2008. For information
on the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after
this date, contact any Canon Service Center.
CT1-1028-000
© CANON INC. 2008
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising